Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneS5200

S5200

P/N : MMBB0192715

(

1.1

)

Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone

depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.

USER GUIDE

S5200

Summary of content (233 pages)

PAGE 1
S 520 0 P/N : MMBB0192715 (1.1) S 520 0 S 520 0 USER GUIDE Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 2
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪
PAGE 4
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪3735‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳ
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮ
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻻﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
PAGE 7
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ S5200‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ)‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ S5200‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ)ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺩﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ‪ .
PAGE 10
‫◄ ﺍ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺗﺸﻮﺵ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫◄ ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎً‪/‬ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ ﺍ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪MP3/‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻷﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪Main‬‬ ‫‪screen‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫‪Confirm‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ key‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫‪ .8 ,2‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .11‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺣﺎ ﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ً‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ *ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ* ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫◄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪،SIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﻰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ “ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻲء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪،PIN code‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PUK‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PUK‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ ‪ (PIN‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PUK‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎً‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎً ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )‬ ‫( ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫( ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء )‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺎً‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ‪].‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(.
PAGE 24
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪.‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﺎﻴﺧ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ T9‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،T9‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.T9‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻝ ﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫”ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ”ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻭﺭﺩ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫‪ 1.1‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1.3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2.1‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ 3.1‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 4.1‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 5.1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 4.2‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5.2‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1.5.2‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.5.2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3.5.2‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ 6.2‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ 1.6.2‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.6.2‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1.2.3‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.
PAGE 30
‫‪ 1.5‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1.1.5‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.1.5‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2.5‬ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 3.5‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ 4.5‬ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 5.5‬ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫‪ 6.5‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1.6.5‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2.6.5‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 7.5‬ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫‪ 1.7.5‬ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.7.5‬ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺱ‬ ‫‪ 3.7.5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪ 8.5‬ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1.6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2.6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 3.6‬ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 4.6‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪MP3 5.6‬‬ ‫‪ 1.5.6‬ﻣُﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪ 2.5.6‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 3.5.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ّ 6.6‬‬ ‫‪ 1.6.6‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 2.6.
PAGE 31
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 4.7‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ PIN 1.4.7‬ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ 2.4.7‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ 3.4.7‬ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 4.4.7‬ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 5.4.7‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 6.4.7‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪ 5.7‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1.5.7‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.5.7‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ 6.7‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ 1.6.7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 2.6.7‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 7.7‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪ 8.7‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1.8.7‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.8.7‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1.
PAGE 32
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫[ ﻭ]‬ ‫]‬ ‫[‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ‪“ :‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ” ﻭ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ” ﻭ”ﻋﺎﻡ”‬ ‫ﻭ”ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ” ﻭ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ”‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫“ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ” ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-×-1‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-×-1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ “ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ” ﻭ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ”‬ ‫ﻭ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ” ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ” ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )‪ (CLI‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 36
‫◄ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ‬ ‫]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ÷,×,-,+‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻮّﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫]ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1-1-4‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺑﺤﺚ” ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ .
PAGE 40
‫‪ .e‬ﻫـ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪. , ,‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3-1-4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻀﺎء‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮﺍً‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(6-1-4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪ /‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4-2-4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(5-2-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(6-2-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 44
‫( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪Messages‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-5‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1-1-5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ )‪.(SMS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ‪SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ )ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ T9‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “‪) ”T9 off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪.(T9‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﻴﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ[ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ “ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ”‪ .
PAGE 46
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬ ‫ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻫﻮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﺤﺜﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ MMS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 48
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪..‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-5‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ(‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ .GSM‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 50
‫◄ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ :SMS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ SMS‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2-8-5‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(5-8-5‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪.Push‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪.Push‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Push‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،Push‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-6‬‬ ‫ﻳ ّ‬ ‫ُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.
PAGE 54
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺎً‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ‪ ،MPEG-1 Layer III‬ﻭ‪،MPEG-2 Layer III‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ MPEG-2.5 Layer III‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﻤﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻟﻴﺰﺭ‬‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3-5-6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔﺍﻛﻮﻟﻴﺰﺭ‪،‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﺒﻞ‪،‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1-6-6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪..‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1-3-7‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫• ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2-3-7‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4-3-7‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫◄ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫]ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(6-3-7‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-7‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1-4-7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 62
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-7‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1-5-7‬‬ ‫ﺁﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ”‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫“ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ” ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ” ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫“ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫” ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎ‬ ‫@ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ : :‬ﺳﺘﺨﺪ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎ “‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻣﻮ ‪ .‬ﻹ ﺧﺎ “‪ ،”.‬ﺿﻐﻂ“‬ ‫”‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹ ﺧﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.(WAP‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ (WAP‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(ISDN‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .
PAGE 67
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻻﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-9‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1-1-9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺏ ﻋﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻯ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪ ،Java‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‬ ‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J2ME (Java 2‬‬ ‫‪ (Micro Edition‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J2SE(Java 2 Standard‬‬ ‫‪ Edition‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2-1-9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) UMS‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ (USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )‪ 64‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗُﻌﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ 460) JPG‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪100) GIF‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪.MMS‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،UMS‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 71
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .3GP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ – ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ – ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ “ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ”‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪S5200 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪) C°55+ :‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪) C°45+ :‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ(‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪C°10- :‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬
PAGE 74
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳ
PAGE 76
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ
PAGE 77
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮی ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺪ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﻠﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ‪600‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳ
PAGE 78
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
PAGE 79
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻝ ‪.‬ﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ S5200‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍ ﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ ‪ 0.117‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ )‪ ١٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ DASY۴‬ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 82
‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﮔﻮﺷﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫◄ ﺁ ﻟﻮﺩﮔﻰ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫◄ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪MP3/‬‬ ‫◄ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪Confirm‬‬ ‫‪key‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ¡‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪¢‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ .٨ ,٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻰ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻰ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪*.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻰ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPRS‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻠﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪ WAP‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ GPRS‬ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻫﺎﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﻼﻳﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍ ﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﺩﺍﺑﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫◄ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺩﺍﺑﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺳﻔﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫“ﭘﺮ” ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 92
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ)ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ PUK‬ﻭ ‪ (PUK٢‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ۴-۴-٧-‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪..‬‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ‪ ۴) PIN‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺪ ‪ PIN‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ‪ ۴) PUK٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ‪ PUK٢٬‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ‪ PUK٢‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ )‪ ۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ”‪ “٠٠٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍی ‪ ٬‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ )‬ ‫( ﻛﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 95
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ!‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ٬‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭی ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻟﺮ ﺁی ﺩی‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪].‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪(.
PAGE 96
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ABC‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ ٬‬ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ٬‬ﺳﻪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺪﺩی(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 97
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ABC‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫)‪ (Option‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ T٩ Languages‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ T٩ off‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ‪ ٬‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 98
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ )‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ [۴-٣-٧‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ٬‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 100
‫ﺑﺮﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪ /‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪ /‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺟﺎﺭی ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪/‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١٫١‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫١‬ﺳﺎﻛﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫١‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۴٫١‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ ۵٫١‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ١٫٢‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٢‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٢‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ ۴٫٢‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ ۵٫٢‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ١٫۵٫٢‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۵٫٢‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫۵٫٢‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ۶٫٢‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ ١٫۶٫٢‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۶٫٢‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 102
‫‪ ١٫۵‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ ١٫١٫۵‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫‪ ١٫١٫۵‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۵‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫۵‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۴٫۵‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ۵٫۵‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۶٫۵‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬ ‫‪ ١٫۶٫۵‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۶٫۵‬ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٧٫۵‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫‪ ١٫٧٫۵‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٧٫۵‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧٫۵‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٨٫۵‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ١٫٨٫۵‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٨٫۵‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٨٫۵‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ ۴٫٨٫۵‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ۵٫٨٫۵‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ ١٫۶‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۶‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫‪ ٣٫۶‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﻦ
PAGE 103
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪ ۴٫٧‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ ١٫۴٫٧‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺪ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۴٫٧‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫۴٫٧‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﻠﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ ۴٫۴٫٧‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ۵٫۴٫٧‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ ۶٫۴٫٧‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺪ‬ ‫‪ ۵٫٧‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١٫۵٫٧‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۵٫٧‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪ ۶٫٧‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ ١٫۶٫٧‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۶٫٧‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ ٧٫٧‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٨٫٧‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١٫٨٫٧‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٨٫٧‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫[ ﻭ]‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻯ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪ ,‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪,‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪ ,‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪١-×-١-‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪٣-×-١-‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ )‪ (CLI‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ( ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 108
‫◄ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢-۵-٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 109
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪] .‬ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫]ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٣‬‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ ۴‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-٣‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎی ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫]ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 111
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۴‬‬ ‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١-١-۴‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 112
‫]ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .d‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪ .e‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٣-١-۴‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﻀﻮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻞ ‪ ٧‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 113
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬‫ﺷﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ‬‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻔﺘﮕﯽ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢-٢-۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﮐﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٣-٢-۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(۴-٢-۴‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(۵-٢-۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(۶-٢-۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 116
‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ )‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۵‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١-١-۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬ ‫)‪ (SMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻭ ‪ SMS‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮐﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ”‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 117
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ‪ :T٩‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ T٩‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ]ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی[ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 118
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ‬‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭘﺎک‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‘ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ’ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‘ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ’ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫◄ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻮﺭﻭﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺮ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 121
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-۵‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﻛﺴﻰ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻭﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ :SMS‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ SMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢-٨-۵‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(۵-٨-۵‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻧﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫◄ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮی ﻣﻦ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۶‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﻳﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٩‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-۶‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺑﻢ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ‪MPEG-1 Layer III,MPEG-2 Layer III,MPEG-‬‬ ‫‪ 2.5 Layer III‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ‪ 8‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪ 48‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .
PAGE 128
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﮐﭙﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﺁﻓﺮﻳﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭙﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﭙﻲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭙﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-۶‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١-٧-۶‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢-٧-۶‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﭙﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﭙﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫] ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٧‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﺮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١-١-٧‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 132
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١-٣-٧‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻓﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻼﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎ ﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢-٣-٧‬‬ ‫◄ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪..‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ[‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٣-٣-٧‬‬ ‫) ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ (‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ‪ ٢‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺪ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٧‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١-۴-٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎی‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎی ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﻠﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٣-۴-٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(۴-۴-٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺯی‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺴﺦ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 136
‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١-۵-٧‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺟﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 137
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﻬﺎی ‪) WAP‬ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ( ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻧﮑﺪﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﺷﻨﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ، WAP‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 138
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ URL‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ‬ ‫@ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫“‪ (”“) ”.‬ﻓﺸﺎ ﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻔﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪GPRS 2‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﻞ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ WAP‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﻞ )ﺁی ﺍﺱ ﺩی ﺍﻥ(‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻛﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭک ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎ ی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٩‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١-١-٩‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻴﺪﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ[‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢-١-٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ WAP‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٩‬‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻛﻪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ MMS‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) UMS‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪(USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) UMS‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪ (USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫)‪ ۶۴‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ( ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍی ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .
PAGE 144
‫ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﮐﭙﻲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﭙﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﭙﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ٣GP‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ )ﻣﻨﻮ‪-‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮی ﻣﻦ( ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﭙﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭ ‪ ۴‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ -‬ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺯ ﻓﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪S5200 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪) C°55+ :‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ(‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺺ ﻯ‪) C°45+ :‬ﺷﺎﺭژ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﻞ ‪C°10- :‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬
PAGE 148
ENGLISH S 520 0 USER GUIDE Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 149
Table of Contents Ta b l e o f C o n te n ts Introduction Guidelines for safe and efficient use S5200 features 7 11 Parts of the phone Display information 15 Getting started 17 Installing the SIM card and battery Charging the Battery Disconnecting the adapter Turning your phone on and off Access codes Barring password 2 6 16 18 19 20 21 General Functions Call register 36 Making and answering calls 19 Contacts 26 In-call menu Multiparty or conference calls 28 Missed calls Received calls Dialle
PAGE 150
39 Alarm clock Bluetooth 36 Paired devices Handsfree devices Settings 36 36 40 Calculator Unit converter World time Modem 35 35 41 Organiser 42 Messages Contacts 38 New message Search Add new Caller groups Speed dial Settings Copy all Delete all Information 38 38 43 41 44 40 45 41 Write text message Write multimedia message Calendar 46 Add new View daily schedules Delete past Delete all Go to date Set alarm tone 42 42 Memo Calendar Settings 47 42 48 49 Inbox Outbox Drafts Listen to
PAGE 151
Table of Contents Ta b l e o f C o n te n ts Multimedia 58 Settings 63 Security settings 66 Camera Video camera My photos My video MP3 53 Date & Time 57 60 Date Time 57 57 Phone settings 57 Display settings Theme settings Language 64 PIN code request Handset lock Auto key lock timeout Call barring Fixed dial number Change codes Call settings 58 Call divert Answer mode Send my number Call waiting Minute minder Auto redial 58 65 MP3 player Playlist Settings Voice recorder Record View l
PAGE 152
70 Internet Downloads 74 Games & Apps Home Bookmarks Go to URL Settings 66 71 Games & Apps Profiles 66 75 66 SIM service 73 Images Sounds File storage 73 76 Accessories 79 Technical data 80 Ta b l e o f C o n te n ts Service 5
PAGE 153
Introduction I n t ro d u c t i o n Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact S5200 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone.
PAGE 154
Guidelines for safe and efficient use ] The SAR limit recommended by the international Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), which is 2W/kg averaged over ten (10) gram of tissue. Exposure to radio frequency energy ] The highest SAR value for this model phone tested by DASY4 for use at the ear is 0.117 W/kg (10g).
PAGE 155
Guidelines for safe and efficient use G u i d e l i n es f o r s a f e a n d e f f i c i e n t u s e 8 ] The coating of the phone may be damaged if covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper. ] Use dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit. (Do not use solvent such as benzene, thinner or alcohol.) ] Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. ] Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips.
PAGE 156
] When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause serious injury due to improper performance. In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. ] Turn off your mobile phone before boarding any aircraft. ] Do not use it on the ground without crew permission. Blasting area Children Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules.
PAGE 157
Guidelines for safe and efficient use G u i d e l i n es f o r s a f e a n d e f f i c i e n t u s e 10 Battery information and care ] You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. ] Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. ] Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack.
PAGE 158
S5200 features Parts of the phone 1. Headset jack ! Headset jack @ Up/down Connect a headset here. 2. Up/down side keys # Front screen ] When the phone is closed, press this key to change the key pad volume ] Controls the volume of keypad tone in standby mode with the phone open/closed. ] Controls the earpiece volume during a phone call. S 520 0 f e at u res ] Front view 3.
PAGE 159
S5200 features Right side view Rear view S 520 0 f e at u res Camera lens ] Dirt on the camera lens could affect the image quality. Flash Microphone (Video) Battery latch ] Press this button to remove the battery cover. Camera/MP3 key ] Open the slide to reveal the camera lens. Press and hold down this key to activate the camera mode. Also use this key to take a shot. Use the front screen as a viewfinder.
PAGE 160
Open view S 520 0 f e at u res Earpiece ! ^ Main screen Menu Left soft key @ Send key # Contacts & Navigation keys * Right soft key ( Confirm key ) End/Power key Clear key Alphanumeric keys $ Special function keys Microphone % Note ] To prevent the difficulty in hearing of the other side, slide open while using phone.
PAGE 161
S5200 features 1. Earpiece S 520 0 f e at u res 2, 8. Left soft key/ Right soft key: Performs the function indicated by the text on the screen immediately above it. 3. Send key: Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls. You can also quickly access the latest incoming, outgoing and missed calls by pressing the key in standby mode. 4. Alphanumeric keys: Enter numbers, letters and some special characters. 5. Microphone: Can be muted during a call for privacy. 6.
PAGE 162
Icon Description The table below describes various display indicators or icons that appear on the phone’s display screen. Indicates that GPRS service is available. On-Screen Icons Indicates the alarm has been set and is on. Icon Description Indicates the strength of the network signal. * Indicates a call is in progress. Indicates that you are roaming on another network. Note ] *The quality of the conversation may change depending on network coverage.
PAGE 163
S5200 features Icon Description S 520 0 f e at u res Indicates that you can use the push message service. Indicates that the phone is accessing the WAP. Indicates that you are using GPRS. Agenda event set Call divert service active Bluetooth enabled Note 16 ] When the status of the battery indicates low, you may not use Camera or Multimedia function. ] While using Multimedia function, the status of the battery is changeable.
PAGE 164
Getting started Make sure the power is off before you remove the battery. 1. Remove the battery. Press the button to release the battery, then slide the battery down till it stops. Now lift the battery from its compartment. 2. Install the SIM card. Insert the SIM card into the holder. Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards.
PAGE 165
Getting started 3. Install the battery. G ett i n g s ta r te d 1. With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the battery adapter into the socket on the bottom of the phone until it clicks into place. 2. Connect the other end of the mains adapter to the mains socket. Only use the charger included in the box. 3. The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete. Charging the Battery To connect the mains adapter to the phone, you must have installed the battery.
PAGE 166
] Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. ] Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal teeth or nails come into contact with the battery. There is a risk of this causing a fire. ] Do not place or answer calls while charging the phone as it may short-circuit the phone and/or cause electric shock or fire. Disconnecting the adapter Disconnect the travel adapter from the phone by pressing its side buttons as shown in the diagram. 1.
PAGE 167
Getting started G ett i n g s ta r te d Turning your phone on and off Turning your phone ON 1. Install a battery to the handset and connect the phone to an external power source such as the travel adapter, cigarette lighter adapter or handsfree car kit. Or install a charged battery pack to the handset. 2. Press and hold for a few seconds until the LCD screen is turned on. 3. Depending on the status of the PIN code request setting you may need to enter your PIN code. Turning your phone OFF 1.
PAGE 168
Barring password The PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) code is required to unlock a PIN blocked phone. The PUK code may be supplied with the SIM card. If not, contact your network operator for the code. If you lose the code, also contact your network operator. The barring password is required when you use the Call barring function. You can obtain the password from your network operator when you subscribe to this function.
PAGE 169
General Functions G e n e ra l Fu n c t i o n s Making and answering calls Making an international call Making a call 1. Press and hold the key for the international prefix. The ‘+’ character automatically selects the international access code. 1. Make sure your phone is switched on. 2. Enter a phone number, including the area code. ] Press and hold the clear key ( the entire number. 3. Press the send key ( ) to erase ) to call the number. 4. To end the call, press the end key ( right soft key.
PAGE 170
Adjusting the volume Note ] In standby mode with the phone open/closed, pressing the side keys adjusts the key tone volume. Answering a call When you receive a call, the phone rings and the flashing phone icon appears on the screen. If the caller can be identified, the caller’s phone number (or name/photo if saved in the phonebook) is displayed. 1. To answer an incoming call, open the phone. (When Slide open has been set as the answer mode. [Menu 7-3-2].
PAGE 171
General Functions G e n e ra l Fu n c t i o n s Entering text 123 mode (Number mode) You can enter alphanumeric characters by using the phone’s keypad. For example, storing names in the phonebook, writing a message, creating a personal greeting. Type numbers using one keystroke per number. To change to 123 mode in a text entry field, press the key until 123 mode is displayed. The following text input methods are available in the phone.
PAGE 172
1. When you are in the T9 predictive text input mode, start entering a word by pressing keys to . Press one key per letter. ] The word changes as letters are typed. Ignore what’s on the screen until the word is typed completely. ] If the word is still incorrect after typing completely, press the down navigation key once or more to cycle through the other word options. Example: Press Good. You can select the language of the T9 mode. Press the left soft key [Option], then select T9 languages.
PAGE 173
General Functions G e n e ra l Fu n c t i o n s 2. To insert a space, press the key once. To delete letters, press the key. Press and hold down the key to clear the whole display. Note ] Refer to the table below for more information on the characters available using the alphanumeric keys. Key 26 Characters in the order display Upper Case Lower Case . , / ? ! - : ' '' 1 .
PAGE 174
During a call Making a second call You can get a number you wish to dial from the phonebook to make a second call. Press the right soft key then select Search. To save the dialled number into the phonebook during a call, press the right soft key then select Add new. Switching between two calls If Call waiting is activated, you can put the first call on hold and answer the second, by pressing or by selecting the left soft key, then Hold & Answer.
PAGE 175
General Functions G e n e ra l Fu n c t i o n s Switching DTMF tones on during a call Making a second call To turn DTMF tones on during a call, press the left soft key, and then select DTMF on. DTMF tones can be turned off the same way. DTMF tones allow your phone to make use of an automated switchboard. You can make a second call while currently on a call. Enter the second number and press the key. When the second call is connected, the first call is automatically placed on hold.
PAGE 176
Adding calls to the conference call Displaying callers in a conference call To scroll through the numbers of the callers who make up a conference call on the handset screen, use the up/down navigation keys. G e n e ra l Fu n c t i o n s To add a call to an existing conference call, press the left soft key, then select the Conference/Join all. After pressing the left soft key, selecting Conference/End all will end all the active and onhold calls.
PAGE 177
Menu Tree M e nu Tre e 1. Profiles 3.1 Alarm clock 1.2 Silent 3.2 Bluetooth 1.3 General 1.4 Loud 1.5 Headset 2. Call register 3.2.1 Paired devices 3.2.2 Handsfree devices 3.2.3 Settings 3.3 Calculator 3.4 Unit converter 2.1 Missed calls 3.5 World time 2.2 Received calls 3.6 Modem 2.3 Dialled calls 2.4 Delete recent calls 2.5 Call charges 2.5.1 Call duration 2.5.2 Call costs 2.5.3 Settings 2.6 GPRS information 2.6.1 Call duration 2.6.2 Data volumes 30 3. Tools 1.1 Vibrate only 4.
PAGE 178
5.1 New message 5.1.1 Write text message 5.1.2 Write multimedia message 5.2 Inbox 5.3 Outbox 5.4 Drafts 5.5 Listen to voice mail 5.6 Info message 5.6.1 Read 5.6.2 Topics 5.7 Templates 5.7.1 Text templates 5.7.2 Multimedia templates 5.7.3 My business card 6. Multimedia 6.1 Camera 6.2 Video camera 6.3 My photos 6.4 My video 6.5 MP3 6.5.1 MP3 player 6.5.2 Playlist 6.5.3 Settings 6.6 Voice recorder 6.6.1 Record 6.6.2 View list 6.7 Settings 6.7.1 Camera 6.7.2 Video camera 7. Settings 7.1 Date & Time 7.1.
PAGE 179
Menu Tree M e nu Tre e 32 8. Service 7.4 Security settings 7.4.1 PIN code request 7.4.2 Handset lock 7.4.3 Auto key lock timeout 7.4.4 Call barring 7.4.5 Fixed dial number 7.4.6 Change codes 7.5 Network settings 7.5.1 Network selection 7.5.2 Band selection 7.6 GPRS setting 7.6.1 Switch on 7.6.2 When needed 7.7 Reset settings 7.7.1 Restore Default Settings 7.7.2 Clear Multimedia memory 7.8 Memory status 7.8.1 Internal memory 7.8.2 Multimedia memory 9. Downloads 8.1 Internet 8.1.1 Home 8.1.2 Bookmarks 8.
PAGE 180
Selecting Functions and Options Menu Contacts The role of the soft keys vary according to the current context or the label on the bottom line of the screen just above each key indicates its current role. Press the left soft key to access the available menu. Press the right soft key to access the available Contacts. S e l e c t i n g Fu n c t i o n s a n d O pt i o n s Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customise the phone.
PAGE 181
Profiles P ro f i l es In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five preset profiles: Vibrate only, Silent, General, Loud and Headset. Each profile can be personalised. Press the left soft key [Menu] and select Profiles using up/down navigation keys. Activate ] Call alert type: Set the alert type for incoming calls. ] Ring tone: Select the desired ring tone from the list.
PAGE 182
] • Off: The phone will not answer automatically. P ro f i l es Auto answer: This function will be activated only when your phone is connected to the headset. • After 5 secs: After 5 seconds, the phone will answer automatically. • After 10 secs: After 10 seconds, the phone will answer automatically. Rename Menu 1.x.3 You can rename a profile and give it any name you want. Note ] Vibrate only, Silent and Headset profiles cannot be renamed. 1.
PAGE 183
Call register C a l l re g i s te r You can check the record of missed, received, and dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. The number and name (if available) are displayed together with the date and time at which the call was made. You can also view call times. Missed calls Menu 2.1 This option lets you view the last 10 unanswered calls.
PAGE 184
Menu 2.4 Call costs (Menu 2.5.2) Allows you to delete Missed calls and Received calls lists. You can delete Dialled calls and All calls lists at one time. Allows you to check the cost of your last call, all calls, remaining and reset the cost. To reset the cost, you need to know your PIN2 code. Call charges Settings (Menu 2.5.3) Menu 2.5 Call duration (Menu 2.5.1) (SIM Dependent) ] Set tariff: You can set the currency type and the unit price.
PAGE 185
Call register C a l l re g i s te r GPRS information Menu 2.6 You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option. In addition, you can also view how much time you are online. Call duration (Menu 2.6.1) You can check the duration of Last call and All calls. You can also reset the call timers. Data volumes (Menu 2.6.2) You can check the Sent(Last/All), Received(Last/All) or All data volumes and Reset all.
PAGE 186
Tools Menu 3.1 You can set up to 5 alarm clocks to go off at a specified time. 1. Select On and enter the alarm time you want. 2. Select the repeat period: Once, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Wed, Sat~Thu, Everyday. 3. Select the alarm tone you want and press [OK]. 4. Edit the alarm name and press Bluetooth Depending on the file type, it will be stored in the following folders: ] MP3: MP3 folder (Menu 6.5.2) ] Video (.3GP): video folder (Menu 6.4) ] Phonebook contacts (.VCF): Phonebook (Menu 4.1.
PAGE 187
Tools Settings (Menu 3.2.3) To o l s Note You can register a new device which is compatible with Bluetooth. If you already have added the device, you can connect to it after entering a password (usually 0000). Calculator Menu 3.3 Use key to erase any numbers or signs. If you press key, you can input a minus number. In addition, press key, you can input a decimal number. Unit converter Menu 3.
PAGE 188
Menu 3.6 You can access the network services through Modem. If you want to use PCsync, Contents banks, Internet Cube, you should access the menu and activate the modem and then plug in the USB cable.
PAGE 189
Organiser O rg a n i s e r Contacts Menu 4.1 Note ] ] Edit: You can edit the name, number, group, character and picture by using the navigation key. ] Write text/multimedia message: After you have found the number you want, you can send a text/ multimedia message to the selected number. ] Send via Bluetooth: You can send the data of phone book to devices which is compatible with Bluetooth through Bluetooth. ] Copy: You can copy an entry from SIM to phone or from phone to SIM.
PAGE 190
] Group icon: Allows you to select the icon dependent on Group. 2. Select the memory you want to save to: SIM or Phone. If you set to Phone, you need to select which number you want as Main number. ] Add member: You can add group members. Each group should not exceed 20 members. ] Remove member: You can remove the member from the Group member list. But the name and the number will remain in the phonebook. ] Rename: You can change a group name. a. Press [OK] to input a name. b. Press number.
PAGE 191
Organiser - Name & number: Set the phonebook list by displaying the name and number. Settings (Menu 4.1.5) O rg a n i s e r 1. Press the right soft mode. [Contacts] in standby 2. Scroll to Settings, then press the left soft key [OK]. ] Set memory Scroll to highlight Set memory, and then press the left soft key [OK]. - If you select Variable, when adding entry, the phone will ask whether you wish to store on the sim or phone. - If you select SIM or Phone, the phone will store an entry to SIM or phone.
PAGE 192
You can delete all entries in the SIM and Phone. This function requires the Security code. 1. Press the right soft key [Contacts] in standby mode and select Delete all, press [OK]. 4. Use ] Memory status 1. Open the phonebook first by pressing the right soft key [Contacts] in standby mode. Select Information by pressing the left soft key [OK]. 3. Enter the security code and press the left soft key [OK] or the right soft key [Back]. Information (Menu 4.1.8) 2.
PAGE 193
Organiser O rg a n i s e r Calendar Menu 4.2 When you enter this menu a Calendar will be displayed. The month and year are shown at the top of the screen. Whenever you change the date under the Settings menu, the calender will update automatically. The current date will be highlighted in green and any schedule or memos will be indicated with a red triangle at the top left hand corner of the corresponding square. An audible alarm can be set for memo's and reminders. To change the day, month, and year.
PAGE 194
Menu 4.3 1. Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key [OK]. 2. If the entry is empty, add new by pressing the left soft key [Add]. O rg a n i s e r Memo 3. Input the memo and then press the left soft key [OK]. Note ] If you want to change the text input mode, press the in order. Calendar Settings Menu 4.4 You can choose a type of calendar (A.D , Hijriya or Farsi) by using this function.
PAGE 195
Messages M es s a g es Press the Menu key ( using navigation keys. ) and select Messages New message Menu 5.1 Write text message (Menu 5.1.1) 1. Key in your message. For details on how to enter text, refer to page 24 through 26 (Entering Text). 2. After you complete the message, to select the required option, press the left soft key [Options]. The following options are available. ] Your phone receives voice mail notification messages and Short Message Service(SMS) messages.
PAGE 196
Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own words. This menu will only be shown when the edit mode has been set to T9ABC/T9Abc/T9abc. ] Contacts: You can add phone numbers in the message. ] Symbol: You can attach special characters. ] T9 languages: Select the desired language for T9 input mode. You can also deactivate the T9 input mode by selecting ‘T9 off ’. ] My business card: You can attach your name card.
PAGE 197
Messages M es s a g es 4. Press the left soft key [Options]. The following options are available. ] Send: Supports multiple numbers and email addresses. ] Preview: Displays the multimedia message you wish to send. ] Save: Saves the multimedia message in drafts or as a template. ] Add slide: Adds a slide before or after the current slide. ] Move to slide: Moves to the next or previous slide. ] Delete slide: Deletes the selected slide.
PAGE 198
Menu 5.2 You will be alerted when you have received messages. They will be stored in the Inbox. then need to delete messages, media or applications to free up space. SIM message In the Inbox, you can identify each message by icons. For detail, see the icon directive. Icon Icon directive Multimedia message Short message SIM message Read multimedia message Read text message Push message SIM message means that the message is exceptionally stored in the SIM card.
PAGE 199
Messages ] M es s a g es ] Information: You can view information about received messages; Sender’s address, Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size. Delete all: You can delete all messages. Outbox You can see the sent and unsent messages here. For sent messages, you can see the delivery status. The browsing is same as that for the inbox message. Icon Specific download message options ] Menu 5.
PAGE 200
] Delete all: You can delete all messages in the outbox. The following options are available. ] View: You can see the multimedia messages. ] Edit: Allows you to modify the chosen message. ] Delete: Deletes the message you choose. ] Information: To view the information of the message. ] Delete all: Deletes all of the messages in the folder. When you didn’t send the message: ] View: You can view messages you didn't. ] Delete: You can delete the current message.
PAGE 201
Messages M es s a g es Info message Menu 5.6 (Dependant to network and subscription) Info service messages are text messages sent by the network to mobile phone users. They provide general information such as weather reports, traffic news, taxis, pharmacies, and stock prices. When you receive an info service message, a popup message will indicate a new message receipt or the info service message will be displayed directly.
PAGE 202
Edit: Use this to edit the selected template. ] T9 languages: Selects T9 input mode. ] Delete all: Deletes all templates. ] Exit: Exits the menu. M es s a g es ] Multimedia templates (Menu 5.7.2) My business card (Menu 5.7.3) You can use the following options. This option helps you to make your own name card. Key in the name, mobile phone number, office number, Fax number, and E-mail address. ] Preview: Displays the draft multimedia message. ] Save: Saves multimedia messages as templates.
PAGE 203
Messages M es s a g es ] Delivery report: If you set to Yes, you can check whether your message is sent successfully. ] Reply charging: When a message is sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge the cost of the reply to your telephone bill. This feature is not supported by some network operators. ] SMS centre: If you want to send the text message, you can receive the address of SMS centre through this menu.
PAGE 204
Info message (Menu 5.8.4) ] Receive Receive Receive on: Receive all push messages. Yes: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages. Receive off: Does not receive all push messages. ] Auto download No: If you select this menu, your phone will not receive Info service messages any more. On: The push message is downloaded automatically. Alert Off: To download the push message, use user interaction.
PAGE 205
Multimedia Multimedia Camera Menu 6.1 ] Brightness: Determines the brightness. ] Size: Determines the size of an image. ] Timer: Determines the delay time. ] Quality: Determines the quality of an image. ] White Balance : Allows you to change the settings according to the environment. ] Album: Shows the still images taken. ] Exit: To exit the Camera. ] Mode: Determines whether to take a single or multishot photo. ] Effect: Determines the special effect to the picture.
PAGE 206
] Album: Shows the video clips recorded. ] ] Exit: To exit the Video camera. ] Edit title: You can edit the title of picture. ] Effect: Determines the special effect to the video clip. ] Information: You can view the information about Title, Size, Date and Time you’ve taken. ] Flash: Determines the flash operation. ] Zoom: Determines the zoom rate. Delete: You can delete a picture. Multimedia My video Menu 6.4 You can play and send a video. My photos Menu 6.
PAGE 207
Multimedia Multimedia MP3 Menu 6.5 The S5200 has an integrated MP3 player built-in. You can enjoy listening to MP3 music files on your phone memory using a compatible headset or via the internal loudspeaker. Note ] Because of the small dimension of the speaker, in some cases the audio could be distorted, especially at maximum volume and when there are lots of bass sounds. Therefore, we recommend you to use the stereo headset in order to appreciate the high quality of your music.
PAGE 208
MP3 player (Menu 6.5.1) 2. Press the left soft key the following menus. [Options] to access ] View play list: You can view the play list on listening to the music. ] Area repeat: The special area part of the current music is repeated when you select ON of the menu. ] Set as ring tone: This menu allows to set the MP3 file as a ring tone. You can also set it as a ring tone in Profile. ] Setting - Equalizer This menu helps you to adjust a varity of environment on listening to the music.
PAGE 209
Multimedia Multimedia Settings (Menu 6.5.3) Settings This menu allows to set the following items; Equalizer, Playmode, Set shuffle and Visual effect. Camera (Menu 6.7.1) ] Auto save: If you set On, the images will be saved automatically without displaying menu bar to save. The voice memo feature you to record up to 10 voice messages and each memo is up to 20 Seconds. ] Delete all photos: This menu allows to delete all photos after asking your confirmation. Record (Menu 6.6.1) Video camera (Menu 6.
PAGE 210
Settings Phone settings You can set functions relating to the phone. 1. Press [Menu] in standby mode. 2. Press for direct access to enter Settings. Date & Time Menu 7.2 Display settings (Menu 7.2.1) ] Menu 7.1 You can set functions relating to the date and time. Set Date: You can enter the current date. ] Date format: You can set the Date format such as DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) Time (Menu 7.1.2) ] Set Time: You can enter the current time.
PAGE 211
Settings ] Theme settings (Menu 7.2.2) S ett i n g s ] Language (Menu 7.2.3) You can change the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the Language Input mode. Call settings Menu 7.3 You can set the menu relevant to a call by pressing [OK] in the Setting menu. Call divert (Menu 7.3.1) The Call divert service allows you to divert incoming voice calls, fax calls, and data calls to another number. For details, contact your service provider.
PAGE 212
Send my number (Menu 7.3.3) Inputs the number for diverting. (network and subscription dependent) To favourite number ] If you select this, you can send your phone number depending on two line service such as line 1 or line 2. You can check recent 5 diverted numbers. • Cancel Deactivate the corresponding service. ] View the status of the corresponding service. ] ] ] Off Your phone number will not be shown.
PAGE 213
Settings ] S ett i n g s 1. Select PIN code request in the security settings menu, and then press [OK]. View status Shows the status of Call waiting. 2. Set On/Off. Minute minder (Menu 7.3.5) If you select On, you can check the call duration by a deep sound given every minute during a call. Auto redial (Menu 7.3.6) ] On When this function is activated, the phone will automatically try to redial in the case of failure to connect a call. ] 4.
PAGE 214
Auto key lock timeout (Menu 7.4.3) ] The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls. This function requires the call barring password. You can view the following submenus. ] All outgoing The barring service for all outgoing calls. ] ] ] Change password You can change the password for Call Barring Service. The submenus: • Activate Allows to request the network to set call restriction on. International • Cancel Set the selected call restriction off.
PAGE 215
Settings ] S ett i n g s ] Disable Network selection (Menu 7.5.1) You can cancel fixed dialling function. Automatic Number list If you select Automatic mode, the phone will automatically search for and select a network for you. Once you have selected “Automatic”, the phone will be set to “Automatic” even though the power is off and on. You can view the number list saved as Fixed dial number. Change codes (Menu 7.4.
PAGE 216
Band selection (Menu 7.5.2) Reset settings Use this to set the network band between two choices, GSM 900/1800 or GSM1900. You can initialize all default settings. You need the Security code to activate this function. GPRS setting Restore Default Settings (Menu 7.7.1) Switch on (Menu 7.6.1) If you select this menu, the phone is automatically registered to a GPRS network when you switch the phone on.
PAGE 217
Service Service You can access various WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather reports and flight information. These services are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services.
PAGE 218
Go to URL (Menu 8.1.3) This menu allows you to store the URL of favourite web pages for easy access at a later time. Your phone has several pre-installed bookmarks. These pre-installed bookmarks cannot be deleted. You can connect directly to the site you want. After entering a specific URL, press the OK key. To create a bookmark Profiles 1. Press the left soft key [Options]. 2. Select Add new and press the OK key. Settings (Menu 8.1.
PAGE 219
Service Service Call speed: The speed of your data connection ; 9600 or 14400 - Homepage: This setting allows you to enter the address (URL) of a site you want to use as homepage. You do not need to type http:// at the front of each URL as the WAP Browser will automatically add it. - GPRS settings: The service settings are only available when GPRS is chosen as a bearer service. - Bearer: You can set the bearer data service. APN: Input the APN of the GPRS.
PAGE 220
Delete: Deletes the selected profile from the list. SIM service ] Add new: You can add a new profile. (SIM dependent) Cache Set a value whether a connection attempt is made through cache or not. Cookie Check whether a cookie is used or not. Clear cache Removes all context saved in cache. Menu 8.2 Your service provider can offer special applications through the SIM card, such as home banking, stock market, etc.
PAGE 221
Downloads D ow n l o a d s Games & Apps Menu 9.1 Games & Apps (Menu 9.1.1) In this menu, you can manage the Java applications installed in your phone. You can play or delete downloaded applications, or set the connect option. The downloaded applications are organised in folders. Press the left soft key [OK] to open the selected folder or launch the selected midlet. Using the left soft key [Options], the following menus are available.
PAGE 222
] The JAR file is a compressed format of the Java program and the JAD file is a description file that includes all detailed information. From the network, prior to download, you can view all detailed file descriptions from the JAD file. ] While being based on a standard language (J2ME), not all Java applications are compatible with all handsets on sale in so far as specific libraries may be used for a telephone model.
PAGE 223
Downloads ] D ow n l o a d s Send via Bluetooth : Melody Sound can be sent via Bluetooth. File Storage Menu 9.4 This folder is similar to a file storage. It contains all the file transferred through UMS functionality or Bluetooth, as images, sounds and generic files not supported by the phone. Pressing the [Option] softkey, you can view or play the file (if supported), delete it or send it via Bluetooth.
PAGE 224
Note ] Even though you can upload new pictures from the PC, the phone won’t list them in the My photo menu. Therefore, we recommend not to upload anything to this folder. If you want to upload new wallpapers to the phone, please use the dedicated program available in the CD-Rom. - Storage: This folder is similar to a file storage. You can upload any kind of file here, images, audio or even files not specifically supported by the phone (i.e.
PAGE 225
Downloads PC programs and Internet D ow n l o a d s You can connect the phone to your PC to manage your phonebook contacts, upload new contents such as wallpapers and ringtones or use the built in modem. 1. Install the programs included in the CD-Rom. 2. On the phone, open the menu Tools – Modem and confirm the activation. 3. Connect the phone to the PC using the USB cable and start the desired program. Note ] To connect USB, several minutes after power on phone and in the idle window. 4.
PAGE 226
Accessories Standard Battery Data cable/CD Ac c es s o r i es There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. You can connect your phone to PC to exchange the data between them. Headset Allows hands-free operation. Includes earpiece and microphone. Travel Adapter Note ] Always use genuine LG accessories. ] Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty.
PAGE 227
Technical data Te c h n i c a l d ata General Product name : S5200 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max : +55°C (discharging) +45°C (charging) Min : -10°C 80
PAGE 228
PAGE 229
PAGE 230
MEMO
PAGE 231
MEMO
PAGE 232
PAGE 233